powerflex 40 configured ac drives - quad industry

62
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives

Upload: others

Post on 17-Nov-2021

6 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives

Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

PowerFlex DriveExplorer DriveExecutive DPI and SCANport are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc

WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences

Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures

Table of Contents

Preface OverviewWho Should Use this Manual p-1What Is Not in this Manual p-1Reference Materials p-2Manual Conventions p-2General Precautions p-3Compliance Certification p-3Catalog Number Explanation p-4

Chapter 1 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and OptionsChapter Objectives 1-1Standard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-13IO Options 1-14

Chapter 2 Control Wiring OverviewChapter Objectives 2-1Control Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Chapter 3 Mechanical InstallationChapter Objectives 3-1Mounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

Appendix A Specifications

Appendix B Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

2 Table of Contents

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Preface

Overview

The purpose of this manual is to provide basic information needed to install PowerFlexreg 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

User documentation for the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives includes these Installation Instructions and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual Publication 22B-UM001hellip Both manuals are required to properly install and operate PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions

What Is Not in this Manual The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives Installation Instructions is designed to provide only basic installation and operation information For this reason the following topics have not been included

bull Troubleshootingbull Start-Upbull Programming and Parameters

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for detailed drive information

For information on hellip See page hellipWho Should Use this Manual P-1What Is Not in this Manual P-1Reference Materials P-2Manual Conventions P-2General Precautions P-3Compliance Certification P-3Catalog Number Explanation P-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-2 Overview

Reference Materials The following manuals are recommended for general drive information

For detailed PowerFlex 40 information including drive parameters programming start-up troubleshooting specifications

The latest version of this Installation Instructions can be obtained online at hellip wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support

Manual Conventions bull To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used

ndash Parameter Names will appear in [brackets] For example [DC Bus Voltage]

ndash Display Text will appear in ldquoquotesrdquo For example ldquoEnabledrdquo

bull The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Title Publication Available Online at hellipWiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

DRIVES-IN001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment

DRIVES-TD001hellip

Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams

0100-210

Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title Publication Available Online at hellipPowerFlex 40 User Manual 22B-UM001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliteraturePowerFlex Reference Manual PFLEX-RM001hellip

Title Online at hellipAllen-Bradley Drives Technical Support wwwabcomsupportabdrives

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

Publication 23B-IN001G

Overview P-3

General Precautions

Compliance Certification Certifications are applicable to approved program defined options

USCanada UL UL508CCUL CANCSA-C222 No 14

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for additional information

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the voltage at the drive (Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for test point locations) The voltage must be zero

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-4 Overview

Catalog Number Explanation

The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives catalog numbering scheme is shown below

Position

1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16+

23B ndash D 4P0 D 1 0 4 N N ndash P6a b c d e f g h i j

aDrive

Code Type

23B PowerFlex 40

bVoltage Rating

Code Voltage Ph

D 480V ac 3

cAmp Rating

480V 60Hz Input

Code Amps kW (Hp)

1P4 14 04 (05)

2P3 23 075 (10)

4P0 40 15 (20)

6P0 60 22 (30)

010 105 40 (50)

012 12 55 (75)

017 17 75 (10)

024 24 11 (15)

dEnclosure

Code Enclosure

C NEMAUL Type 4X Dagger

D NEMAUL Type 4 Dagger

Dagger The design of the PowerFlex 40 StandardConfigured Drive supports indoor and outdoorapplications that are not in direct sunlight

fEmission Class

Code Rating

0 Not Filtered

gVersion

Code Version

4 RS485 (Standard)

C ControlNet

D DeviceNet

E EtherNetIP

P PROFIBUS DP

hCode Rating

N Reserved

iCode Rating

N Reserved

eHIM

Code Interface Module

1 Fixed Keypad on Drive

F

Fixed Keypad on Drive and LCDDisplay with Digital Speed Control

HIM on Enclosure Door(22-HIM-C2S)

This option changes the enclosure rating toindoor only

jOptions

Code Description

-E22DeviceNet Quick Disconnect

(Bottom)

-E23DeviceNet Quick Disconnect (Left

Side)

-P3 Motor Circuit Protector

-P3TMotor Circuit Protector (Customer

wiring into top of device)

-P6 Disconnect Switch - Fused

-P6TDisconnect Switch - Fused

(Customer wiring into top of device)

-R3DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpringReturn HOA and Power Disconnect

Aux Contact

-R4 DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs)

-R5-R3 plus 4 IO Quick Disconnects

and (1) 24V DC Receptacle

-S1HandOffAuto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S4 AutoManual SS (Speed Ref)

-S7 Start and Stop PB

-S8 ForwardReverse SS

-S18Door Mounted Local Speed Pot (1-

Turn)

-S20LocalRemote and Local Control

OffRun Forward Selector Switches

-S21LocalOffRemote with 1 NO

Interposing Relay

-S22Spring Return HandOff Auto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S23 Clear Fault PB

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 1

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the standard features and operation for PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives and associated options

Standard Features This package integrates the Standard PowerFlex 40 drive The PowerFlex 40 drive can be used for Volts per hertz or Sensorless Vector applications and offers an Autotune feature allowing the drive to adapt to individual motor characteristics

The PowerFlex 40 is assembled in an enclosure which includes the following featureshellip

bull NEMAUL Type 44X - indoor and outdoor applications other than direct sunlight (1)

bull Flange mount driveexternal heatsink reducing overall enclosure size

bull Mounting feet - orientation is adjustable per customer requirements

If required the drive can be removed from the front of the enclosure for ease of assembly or repair

Low cost highly configurable IO inputs andor 0-10V4-20 mA outputs that are not used by program standard features and options are available for customer use

For information on hellip See page hellipStandard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-15IO Options 1-16

(1) The enclosure does not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation corrosion or contamination which may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected For further information on criteria associated with NEMA enclosure ratings refer to NEMA standards Publication No 250-1991 When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated indoor only See enclosure options for specific enclosure style quoted

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 2: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

PowerFlex DriveExplorer DriveExecutive DPI and SCANport are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc

WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences

Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures

Table of Contents

Preface OverviewWho Should Use this Manual p-1What Is Not in this Manual p-1Reference Materials p-2Manual Conventions p-2General Precautions p-3Compliance Certification p-3Catalog Number Explanation p-4

Chapter 1 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and OptionsChapter Objectives 1-1Standard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-13IO Options 1-14

Chapter 2 Control Wiring OverviewChapter Objectives 2-1Control Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Chapter 3 Mechanical InstallationChapter Objectives 3-1Mounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

Appendix A Specifications

Appendix B Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

2 Table of Contents

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Preface

Overview

The purpose of this manual is to provide basic information needed to install PowerFlexreg 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

User documentation for the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives includes these Installation Instructions and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual Publication 22B-UM001hellip Both manuals are required to properly install and operate PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions

What Is Not in this Manual The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives Installation Instructions is designed to provide only basic installation and operation information For this reason the following topics have not been included

bull Troubleshootingbull Start-Upbull Programming and Parameters

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for detailed drive information

For information on hellip See page hellipWho Should Use this Manual P-1What Is Not in this Manual P-1Reference Materials P-2Manual Conventions P-2General Precautions P-3Compliance Certification P-3Catalog Number Explanation P-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-2 Overview

Reference Materials The following manuals are recommended for general drive information

For detailed PowerFlex 40 information including drive parameters programming start-up troubleshooting specifications

The latest version of this Installation Instructions can be obtained online at hellip wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support

Manual Conventions bull To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used

ndash Parameter Names will appear in [brackets] For example [DC Bus Voltage]

ndash Display Text will appear in ldquoquotesrdquo For example ldquoEnabledrdquo

bull The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Title Publication Available Online at hellipWiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

DRIVES-IN001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment

DRIVES-TD001hellip

Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams

0100-210

Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title Publication Available Online at hellipPowerFlex 40 User Manual 22B-UM001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliteraturePowerFlex Reference Manual PFLEX-RM001hellip

Title Online at hellipAllen-Bradley Drives Technical Support wwwabcomsupportabdrives

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

Publication 23B-IN001G

Overview P-3

General Precautions

Compliance Certification Certifications are applicable to approved program defined options

USCanada UL UL508CCUL CANCSA-C222 No 14

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for additional information

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the voltage at the drive (Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for test point locations) The voltage must be zero

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-4 Overview

Catalog Number Explanation

The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives catalog numbering scheme is shown below

Position

1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16+

23B ndash D 4P0 D 1 0 4 N N ndash P6a b c d e f g h i j

aDrive

Code Type

23B PowerFlex 40

bVoltage Rating

Code Voltage Ph

D 480V ac 3

cAmp Rating

480V 60Hz Input

Code Amps kW (Hp)

1P4 14 04 (05)

2P3 23 075 (10)

4P0 40 15 (20)

6P0 60 22 (30)

010 105 40 (50)

012 12 55 (75)

017 17 75 (10)

024 24 11 (15)

dEnclosure

Code Enclosure

C NEMAUL Type 4X Dagger

D NEMAUL Type 4 Dagger

Dagger The design of the PowerFlex 40 StandardConfigured Drive supports indoor and outdoorapplications that are not in direct sunlight

fEmission Class

Code Rating

0 Not Filtered

gVersion

Code Version

4 RS485 (Standard)

C ControlNet

D DeviceNet

E EtherNetIP

P PROFIBUS DP

hCode Rating

N Reserved

iCode Rating

N Reserved

eHIM

Code Interface Module

1 Fixed Keypad on Drive

F

Fixed Keypad on Drive and LCDDisplay with Digital Speed Control

HIM on Enclosure Door(22-HIM-C2S)

This option changes the enclosure rating toindoor only

jOptions

Code Description

-E22DeviceNet Quick Disconnect

(Bottom)

-E23DeviceNet Quick Disconnect (Left

Side)

-P3 Motor Circuit Protector

-P3TMotor Circuit Protector (Customer

wiring into top of device)

-P6 Disconnect Switch - Fused

-P6TDisconnect Switch - Fused

(Customer wiring into top of device)

-R3DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpringReturn HOA and Power Disconnect

Aux Contact

-R4 DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs)

-R5-R3 plus 4 IO Quick Disconnects

and (1) 24V DC Receptacle

-S1HandOffAuto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S4 AutoManual SS (Speed Ref)

-S7 Start and Stop PB

-S8 ForwardReverse SS

-S18Door Mounted Local Speed Pot (1-

Turn)

-S20LocalRemote and Local Control

OffRun Forward Selector Switches

-S21LocalOffRemote with 1 NO

Interposing Relay

-S22Spring Return HandOff Auto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S23 Clear Fault PB

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 1

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the standard features and operation for PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives and associated options

Standard Features This package integrates the Standard PowerFlex 40 drive The PowerFlex 40 drive can be used for Volts per hertz or Sensorless Vector applications and offers an Autotune feature allowing the drive to adapt to individual motor characteristics

The PowerFlex 40 is assembled in an enclosure which includes the following featureshellip

bull NEMAUL Type 44X - indoor and outdoor applications other than direct sunlight (1)

bull Flange mount driveexternal heatsink reducing overall enclosure size

bull Mounting feet - orientation is adjustable per customer requirements

If required the drive can be removed from the front of the enclosure for ease of assembly or repair

Low cost highly configurable IO inputs andor 0-10V4-20 mA outputs that are not used by program standard features and options are available for customer use

For information on hellip See page hellipStandard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-15IO Options 1-16

(1) The enclosure does not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation corrosion or contamination which may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected For further information on criteria associated with NEMA enclosure ratings refer to NEMA standards Publication No 250-1991 When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated indoor only See enclosure options for specific enclosure style quoted

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 3: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

Table of Contents

Preface OverviewWho Should Use this Manual p-1What Is Not in this Manual p-1Reference Materials p-2Manual Conventions p-2General Precautions p-3Compliance Certification p-3Catalog Number Explanation p-4

Chapter 1 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and OptionsChapter Objectives 1-1Standard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-13IO Options 1-14

Chapter 2 Control Wiring OverviewChapter Objectives 2-1Control Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Chapter 3 Mechanical InstallationChapter Objectives 3-1Mounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

Appendix A Specifications

Appendix B Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

2 Table of Contents

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Preface

Overview

The purpose of this manual is to provide basic information needed to install PowerFlexreg 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

User documentation for the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives includes these Installation Instructions and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual Publication 22B-UM001hellip Both manuals are required to properly install and operate PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions

What Is Not in this Manual The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives Installation Instructions is designed to provide only basic installation and operation information For this reason the following topics have not been included

bull Troubleshootingbull Start-Upbull Programming and Parameters

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for detailed drive information

For information on hellip See page hellipWho Should Use this Manual P-1What Is Not in this Manual P-1Reference Materials P-2Manual Conventions P-2General Precautions P-3Compliance Certification P-3Catalog Number Explanation P-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-2 Overview

Reference Materials The following manuals are recommended for general drive information

For detailed PowerFlex 40 information including drive parameters programming start-up troubleshooting specifications

The latest version of this Installation Instructions can be obtained online at hellip wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support

Manual Conventions bull To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used

ndash Parameter Names will appear in [brackets] For example [DC Bus Voltage]

ndash Display Text will appear in ldquoquotesrdquo For example ldquoEnabledrdquo

bull The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Title Publication Available Online at hellipWiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

DRIVES-IN001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment

DRIVES-TD001hellip

Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams

0100-210

Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title Publication Available Online at hellipPowerFlex 40 User Manual 22B-UM001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliteraturePowerFlex Reference Manual PFLEX-RM001hellip

Title Online at hellipAllen-Bradley Drives Technical Support wwwabcomsupportabdrives

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

Publication 23B-IN001G

Overview P-3

General Precautions

Compliance Certification Certifications are applicable to approved program defined options

USCanada UL UL508CCUL CANCSA-C222 No 14

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for additional information

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the voltage at the drive (Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for test point locations) The voltage must be zero

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-4 Overview

Catalog Number Explanation

The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives catalog numbering scheme is shown below

Position

1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16+

23B ndash D 4P0 D 1 0 4 N N ndash P6a b c d e f g h i j

aDrive

Code Type

23B PowerFlex 40

bVoltage Rating

Code Voltage Ph

D 480V ac 3

cAmp Rating

480V 60Hz Input

Code Amps kW (Hp)

1P4 14 04 (05)

2P3 23 075 (10)

4P0 40 15 (20)

6P0 60 22 (30)

010 105 40 (50)

012 12 55 (75)

017 17 75 (10)

024 24 11 (15)

dEnclosure

Code Enclosure

C NEMAUL Type 4X Dagger

D NEMAUL Type 4 Dagger

Dagger The design of the PowerFlex 40 StandardConfigured Drive supports indoor and outdoorapplications that are not in direct sunlight

fEmission Class

Code Rating

0 Not Filtered

gVersion

Code Version

4 RS485 (Standard)

C ControlNet

D DeviceNet

E EtherNetIP

P PROFIBUS DP

hCode Rating

N Reserved

iCode Rating

N Reserved

eHIM

Code Interface Module

1 Fixed Keypad on Drive

F

Fixed Keypad on Drive and LCDDisplay with Digital Speed Control

HIM on Enclosure Door(22-HIM-C2S)

This option changes the enclosure rating toindoor only

jOptions

Code Description

-E22DeviceNet Quick Disconnect

(Bottom)

-E23DeviceNet Quick Disconnect (Left

Side)

-P3 Motor Circuit Protector

-P3TMotor Circuit Protector (Customer

wiring into top of device)

-P6 Disconnect Switch - Fused

-P6TDisconnect Switch - Fused

(Customer wiring into top of device)

-R3DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpringReturn HOA and Power Disconnect

Aux Contact

-R4 DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs)

-R5-R3 plus 4 IO Quick Disconnects

and (1) 24V DC Receptacle

-S1HandOffAuto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S4 AutoManual SS (Speed Ref)

-S7 Start and Stop PB

-S8 ForwardReverse SS

-S18Door Mounted Local Speed Pot (1-

Turn)

-S20LocalRemote and Local Control

OffRun Forward Selector Switches

-S21LocalOffRemote with 1 NO

Interposing Relay

-S22Spring Return HandOff Auto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S23 Clear Fault PB

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 1

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the standard features and operation for PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives and associated options

Standard Features This package integrates the Standard PowerFlex 40 drive The PowerFlex 40 drive can be used for Volts per hertz or Sensorless Vector applications and offers an Autotune feature allowing the drive to adapt to individual motor characteristics

The PowerFlex 40 is assembled in an enclosure which includes the following featureshellip

bull NEMAUL Type 44X - indoor and outdoor applications other than direct sunlight (1)

bull Flange mount driveexternal heatsink reducing overall enclosure size

bull Mounting feet - orientation is adjustable per customer requirements

If required the drive can be removed from the front of the enclosure for ease of assembly or repair

Low cost highly configurable IO inputs andor 0-10V4-20 mA outputs that are not used by program standard features and options are available for customer use

For information on hellip See page hellipStandard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-15IO Options 1-16

(1) The enclosure does not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation corrosion or contamination which may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected For further information on criteria associated with NEMA enclosure ratings refer to NEMA standards Publication No 250-1991 When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated indoor only See enclosure options for specific enclosure style quoted

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 4: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

2 Table of Contents

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Preface

Overview

The purpose of this manual is to provide basic information needed to install PowerFlexreg 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

User documentation for the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives includes these Installation Instructions and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual Publication 22B-UM001hellip Both manuals are required to properly install and operate PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions

What Is Not in this Manual The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives Installation Instructions is designed to provide only basic installation and operation information For this reason the following topics have not been included

bull Troubleshootingbull Start-Upbull Programming and Parameters

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for detailed drive information

For information on hellip See page hellipWho Should Use this Manual P-1What Is Not in this Manual P-1Reference Materials P-2Manual Conventions P-2General Precautions P-3Compliance Certification P-3Catalog Number Explanation P-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-2 Overview

Reference Materials The following manuals are recommended for general drive information

For detailed PowerFlex 40 information including drive parameters programming start-up troubleshooting specifications

The latest version of this Installation Instructions can be obtained online at hellip wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support

Manual Conventions bull To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used

ndash Parameter Names will appear in [brackets] For example [DC Bus Voltage]

ndash Display Text will appear in ldquoquotesrdquo For example ldquoEnabledrdquo

bull The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Title Publication Available Online at hellipWiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

DRIVES-IN001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment

DRIVES-TD001hellip

Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams

0100-210

Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title Publication Available Online at hellipPowerFlex 40 User Manual 22B-UM001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliteraturePowerFlex Reference Manual PFLEX-RM001hellip

Title Online at hellipAllen-Bradley Drives Technical Support wwwabcomsupportabdrives

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

Publication 23B-IN001G

Overview P-3

General Precautions

Compliance Certification Certifications are applicable to approved program defined options

USCanada UL UL508CCUL CANCSA-C222 No 14

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for additional information

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the voltage at the drive (Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for test point locations) The voltage must be zero

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-4 Overview

Catalog Number Explanation

The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives catalog numbering scheme is shown below

Position

1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16+

23B ndash D 4P0 D 1 0 4 N N ndash P6a b c d e f g h i j

aDrive

Code Type

23B PowerFlex 40

bVoltage Rating

Code Voltage Ph

D 480V ac 3

cAmp Rating

480V 60Hz Input

Code Amps kW (Hp)

1P4 14 04 (05)

2P3 23 075 (10)

4P0 40 15 (20)

6P0 60 22 (30)

010 105 40 (50)

012 12 55 (75)

017 17 75 (10)

024 24 11 (15)

dEnclosure

Code Enclosure

C NEMAUL Type 4X Dagger

D NEMAUL Type 4 Dagger

Dagger The design of the PowerFlex 40 StandardConfigured Drive supports indoor and outdoorapplications that are not in direct sunlight

fEmission Class

Code Rating

0 Not Filtered

gVersion

Code Version

4 RS485 (Standard)

C ControlNet

D DeviceNet

E EtherNetIP

P PROFIBUS DP

hCode Rating

N Reserved

iCode Rating

N Reserved

eHIM

Code Interface Module

1 Fixed Keypad on Drive

F

Fixed Keypad on Drive and LCDDisplay with Digital Speed Control

HIM on Enclosure Door(22-HIM-C2S)

This option changes the enclosure rating toindoor only

jOptions

Code Description

-E22DeviceNet Quick Disconnect

(Bottom)

-E23DeviceNet Quick Disconnect (Left

Side)

-P3 Motor Circuit Protector

-P3TMotor Circuit Protector (Customer

wiring into top of device)

-P6 Disconnect Switch - Fused

-P6TDisconnect Switch - Fused

(Customer wiring into top of device)

-R3DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpringReturn HOA and Power Disconnect

Aux Contact

-R4 DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs)

-R5-R3 plus 4 IO Quick Disconnects

and (1) 24V DC Receptacle

-S1HandOffAuto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S4 AutoManual SS (Speed Ref)

-S7 Start and Stop PB

-S8 ForwardReverse SS

-S18Door Mounted Local Speed Pot (1-

Turn)

-S20LocalRemote and Local Control

OffRun Forward Selector Switches

-S21LocalOffRemote with 1 NO

Interposing Relay

-S22Spring Return HandOff Auto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S23 Clear Fault PB

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 1

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the standard features and operation for PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives and associated options

Standard Features This package integrates the Standard PowerFlex 40 drive The PowerFlex 40 drive can be used for Volts per hertz or Sensorless Vector applications and offers an Autotune feature allowing the drive to adapt to individual motor characteristics

The PowerFlex 40 is assembled in an enclosure which includes the following featureshellip

bull NEMAUL Type 44X - indoor and outdoor applications other than direct sunlight (1)

bull Flange mount driveexternal heatsink reducing overall enclosure size

bull Mounting feet - orientation is adjustable per customer requirements

If required the drive can be removed from the front of the enclosure for ease of assembly or repair

Low cost highly configurable IO inputs andor 0-10V4-20 mA outputs that are not used by program standard features and options are available for customer use

For information on hellip See page hellipStandard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-15IO Options 1-16

(1) The enclosure does not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation corrosion or contamination which may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected For further information on criteria associated with NEMA enclosure ratings refer to NEMA standards Publication No 250-1991 When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated indoor only See enclosure options for specific enclosure style quoted

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 5: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

Preface

Overview

The purpose of this manual is to provide basic information needed to install PowerFlexreg 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

User documentation for the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives includes these Installation Instructions and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual Publication 22B-UM001hellip Both manuals are required to properly install and operate PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions

What Is Not in this Manual The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives Installation Instructions is designed to provide only basic installation and operation information For this reason the following topics have not been included

bull Troubleshootingbull Start-Upbull Programming and Parameters

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for detailed drive information

For information on hellip See page hellipWho Should Use this Manual P-1What Is Not in this Manual P-1Reference Materials P-2Manual Conventions P-2General Precautions P-3Compliance Certification P-3Catalog Number Explanation P-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-2 Overview

Reference Materials The following manuals are recommended for general drive information

For detailed PowerFlex 40 information including drive parameters programming start-up troubleshooting specifications

The latest version of this Installation Instructions can be obtained online at hellip wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support

Manual Conventions bull To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used

ndash Parameter Names will appear in [brackets] For example [DC Bus Voltage]

ndash Display Text will appear in ldquoquotesrdquo For example ldquoEnabledrdquo

bull The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Title Publication Available Online at hellipWiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

DRIVES-IN001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment

DRIVES-TD001hellip

Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams

0100-210

Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title Publication Available Online at hellipPowerFlex 40 User Manual 22B-UM001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliteraturePowerFlex Reference Manual PFLEX-RM001hellip

Title Online at hellipAllen-Bradley Drives Technical Support wwwabcomsupportabdrives

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

Publication 23B-IN001G

Overview P-3

General Precautions

Compliance Certification Certifications are applicable to approved program defined options

USCanada UL UL508CCUL CANCSA-C222 No 14

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for additional information

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the voltage at the drive (Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for test point locations) The voltage must be zero

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-4 Overview

Catalog Number Explanation

The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives catalog numbering scheme is shown below

Position

1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16+

23B ndash D 4P0 D 1 0 4 N N ndash P6a b c d e f g h i j

aDrive

Code Type

23B PowerFlex 40

bVoltage Rating

Code Voltage Ph

D 480V ac 3

cAmp Rating

480V 60Hz Input

Code Amps kW (Hp)

1P4 14 04 (05)

2P3 23 075 (10)

4P0 40 15 (20)

6P0 60 22 (30)

010 105 40 (50)

012 12 55 (75)

017 17 75 (10)

024 24 11 (15)

dEnclosure

Code Enclosure

C NEMAUL Type 4X Dagger

D NEMAUL Type 4 Dagger

Dagger The design of the PowerFlex 40 StandardConfigured Drive supports indoor and outdoorapplications that are not in direct sunlight

fEmission Class

Code Rating

0 Not Filtered

gVersion

Code Version

4 RS485 (Standard)

C ControlNet

D DeviceNet

E EtherNetIP

P PROFIBUS DP

hCode Rating

N Reserved

iCode Rating

N Reserved

eHIM

Code Interface Module

1 Fixed Keypad on Drive

F

Fixed Keypad on Drive and LCDDisplay with Digital Speed Control

HIM on Enclosure Door(22-HIM-C2S)

This option changes the enclosure rating toindoor only

jOptions

Code Description

-E22DeviceNet Quick Disconnect

(Bottom)

-E23DeviceNet Quick Disconnect (Left

Side)

-P3 Motor Circuit Protector

-P3TMotor Circuit Protector (Customer

wiring into top of device)

-P6 Disconnect Switch - Fused

-P6TDisconnect Switch - Fused

(Customer wiring into top of device)

-R3DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpringReturn HOA and Power Disconnect

Aux Contact

-R4 DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs)

-R5-R3 plus 4 IO Quick Disconnects

and (1) 24V DC Receptacle

-S1HandOffAuto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S4 AutoManual SS (Speed Ref)

-S7 Start and Stop PB

-S8 ForwardReverse SS

-S18Door Mounted Local Speed Pot (1-

Turn)

-S20LocalRemote and Local Control

OffRun Forward Selector Switches

-S21LocalOffRemote with 1 NO

Interposing Relay

-S22Spring Return HandOff Auto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S23 Clear Fault PB

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 1

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the standard features and operation for PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives and associated options

Standard Features This package integrates the Standard PowerFlex 40 drive The PowerFlex 40 drive can be used for Volts per hertz or Sensorless Vector applications and offers an Autotune feature allowing the drive to adapt to individual motor characteristics

The PowerFlex 40 is assembled in an enclosure which includes the following featureshellip

bull NEMAUL Type 44X - indoor and outdoor applications other than direct sunlight (1)

bull Flange mount driveexternal heatsink reducing overall enclosure size

bull Mounting feet - orientation is adjustable per customer requirements

If required the drive can be removed from the front of the enclosure for ease of assembly or repair

Low cost highly configurable IO inputs andor 0-10V4-20 mA outputs that are not used by program standard features and options are available for customer use

For information on hellip See page hellipStandard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-15IO Options 1-16

(1) The enclosure does not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation corrosion or contamination which may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected For further information on criteria associated with NEMA enclosure ratings refer to NEMA standards Publication No 250-1991 When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated indoor only See enclosure options for specific enclosure style quoted

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA ltFEFF004f007000740069006f006e00730020007000650072006d0065007400740061006e007400200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000700072006f00660065007300730069006f006e006e0065006c007300200066006900610062006c0065007300200070006f007500720020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c00690073006100740069006f006e0020006500740020006c00270069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e002e00200049006c002000650073007400200070006f0073007300690062006c0065002000640027006f00750076007200690072002000630065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f0062006100740020006500740020005200650061006400650072002c002000760065007200730069006f006e002000200035002e00300020006f007500200075006c007400e9007200690065007500720065002egt PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 6: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

P-2 Overview

Reference Materials The following manuals are recommended for general drive information

For detailed PowerFlex 40 information including drive parameters programming start-up troubleshooting specifications

The latest version of this Installation Instructions can be obtained online at hellip wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support

Manual Conventions bull To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used

ndash Parameter Names will appear in [brackets] For example [DC Bus Voltage]

ndash Display Text will appear in ldquoquotesrdquo For example ldquoEnabledrdquo

bull The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Title Publication Available Online at hellipWiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

DRIVES-IN001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment

DRIVES-TD001hellip

Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams

0100-210

Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title Publication Available Online at hellipPowerFlex 40 User Manual 22B-UM001hellip

wwwrockwellautomationcomliteraturePowerFlex Reference Manual PFLEX-RM001hellip

Title Online at hellipAllen-Bradley Drives Technical Support wwwabcomsupportabdrives

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

Publication 23B-IN001G

Overview P-3

General Precautions

Compliance Certification Certifications are applicable to approved program defined options

USCanada UL UL508CCUL CANCSA-C222 No 14

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for additional information

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the voltage at the drive (Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for test point locations) The voltage must be zero

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-4 Overview

Catalog Number Explanation

The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives catalog numbering scheme is shown below

Position

1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16+

23B ndash D 4P0 D 1 0 4 N N ndash P6a b c d e f g h i j

aDrive

Code Type

23B PowerFlex 40

bVoltage Rating

Code Voltage Ph

D 480V ac 3

cAmp Rating

480V 60Hz Input

Code Amps kW (Hp)

1P4 14 04 (05)

2P3 23 075 (10)

4P0 40 15 (20)

6P0 60 22 (30)

010 105 40 (50)

012 12 55 (75)

017 17 75 (10)

024 24 11 (15)

dEnclosure

Code Enclosure

C NEMAUL Type 4X Dagger

D NEMAUL Type 4 Dagger

Dagger The design of the PowerFlex 40 StandardConfigured Drive supports indoor and outdoorapplications that are not in direct sunlight

fEmission Class

Code Rating

0 Not Filtered

gVersion

Code Version

4 RS485 (Standard)

C ControlNet

D DeviceNet

E EtherNetIP

P PROFIBUS DP

hCode Rating

N Reserved

iCode Rating

N Reserved

eHIM

Code Interface Module

1 Fixed Keypad on Drive

F

Fixed Keypad on Drive and LCDDisplay with Digital Speed Control

HIM on Enclosure Door(22-HIM-C2S)

This option changes the enclosure rating toindoor only

jOptions

Code Description

-E22DeviceNet Quick Disconnect

(Bottom)

-E23DeviceNet Quick Disconnect (Left

Side)

-P3 Motor Circuit Protector

-P3TMotor Circuit Protector (Customer

wiring into top of device)

-P6 Disconnect Switch - Fused

-P6TDisconnect Switch - Fused

(Customer wiring into top of device)

-R3DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpringReturn HOA and Power Disconnect

Aux Contact

-R4 DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs)

-R5-R3 plus 4 IO Quick Disconnects

and (1) 24V DC Receptacle

-S1HandOffAuto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S4 AutoManual SS (Speed Ref)

-S7 Start and Stop PB

-S8 ForwardReverse SS

-S18Door Mounted Local Speed Pot (1-

Turn)

-S20LocalRemote and Local Control

OffRun Forward Selector Switches

-S21LocalOffRemote with 1 NO

Interposing Relay

-S22Spring Return HandOff Auto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S23 Clear Fault PB

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 1

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the standard features and operation for PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives and associated options

Standard Features This package integrates the Standard PowerFlex 40 drive The PowerFlex 40 drive can be used for Volts per hertz or Sensorless Vector applications and offers an Autotune feature allowing the drive to adapt to individual motor characteristics

The PowerFlex 40 is assembled in an enclosure which includes the following featureshellip

bull NEMAUL Type 44X - indoor and outdoor applications other than direct sunlight (1)

bull Flange mount driveexternal heatsink reducing overall enclosure size

bull Mounting feet - orientation is adjustable per customer requirements

If required the drive can be removed from the front of the enclosure for ease of assembly or repair

Low cost highly configurable IO inputs andor 0-10V4-20 mA outputs that are not used by program standard features and options are available for customer use

For information on hellip See page hellipStandard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-15IO Options 1-16

(1) The enclosure does not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation corrosion or contamination which may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected For further information on criteria associated with NEMA enclosure ratings refer to NEMA standards Publication No 250-1991 When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated indoor only See enclosure options for specific enclosure style quoted

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 7: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

Overview P-3

General Precautions

Compliance Certification Certifications are applicable to approved program defined options

USCanada UL UL508CCUL CANCSA-C222 No 14

Please refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for additional information

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the voltage at the drive (Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for test point locations) The voltage must be zero

Publication 23B-IN001G

P-4 Overview

Catalog Number Explanation

The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives catalog numbering scheme is shown below

Position

1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16+

23B ndash D 4P0 D 1 0 4 N N ndash P6a b c d e f g h i j

aDrive

Code Type

23B PowerFlex 40

bVoltage Rating

Code Voltage Ph

D 480V ac 3

cAmp Rating

480V 60Hz Input

Code Amps kW (Hp)

1P4 14 04 (05)

2P3 23 075 (10)

4P0 40 15 (20)

6P0 60 22 (30)

010 105 40 (50)

012 12 55 (75)

017 17 75 (10)

024 24 11 (15)

dEnclosure

Code Enclosure

C NEMAUL Type 4X Dagger

D NEMAUL Type 4 Dagger

Dagger The design of the PowerFlex 40 StandardConfigured Drive supports indoor and outdoorapplications that are not in direct sunlight

fEmission Class

Code Rating

0 Not Filtered

gVersion

Code Version

4 RS485 (Standard)

C ControlNet

D DeviceNet

E EtherNetIP

P PROFIBUS DP

hCode Rating

N Reserved

iCode Rating

N Reserved

eHIM

Code Interface Module

1 Fixed Keypad on Drive

F

Fixed Keypad on Drive and LCDDisplay with Digital Speed Control

HIM on Enclosure Door(22-HIM-C2S)

This option changes the enclosure rating toindoor only

jOptions

Code Description

-E22DeviceNet Quick Disconnect

(Bottom)

-E23DeviceNet Quick Disconnect (Left

Side)

-P3 Motor Circuit Protector

-P3TMotor Circuit Protector (Customer

wiring into top of device)

-P6 Disconnect Switch - Fused

-P6TDisconnect Switch - Fused

(Customer wiring into top of device)

-R3DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpringReturn HOA and Power Disconnect

Aux Contact

-R4 DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs)

-R5-R3 plus 4 IO Quick Disconnects

and (1) 24V DC Receptacle

-S1HandOffAuto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S4 AutoManual SS (Speed Ref)

-S7 Start and Stop PB

-S8 ForwardReverse SS

-S18Door Mounted Local Speed Pot (1-

Turn)

-S20LocalRemote and Local Control

OffRun Forward Selector Switches

-S21LocalOffRemote with 1 NO

Interposing Relay

-S22Spring Return HandOff Auto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S23 Clear Fault PB

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 1

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the standard features and operation for PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives and associated options

Standard Features This package integrates the Standard PowerFlex 40 drive The PowerFlex 40 drive can be used for Volts per hertz or Sensorless Vector applications and offers an Autotune feature allowing the drive to adapt to individual motor characteristics

The PowerFlex 40 is assembled in an enclosure which includes the following featureshellip

bull NEMAUL Type 44X - indoor and outdoor applications other than direct sunlight (1)

bull Flange mount driveexternal heatsink reducing overall enclosure size

bull Mounting feet - orientation is adjustable per customer requirements

If required the drive can be removed from the front of the enclosure for ease of assembly or repair

Low cost highly configurable IO inputs andor 0-10V4-20 mA outputs that are not used by program standard features and options are available for customer use

For information on hellip See page hellipStandard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-15IO Options 1-16

(1) The enclosure does not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation corrosion or contamination which may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected For further information on criteria associated with NEMA enclosure ratings refer to NEMA standards Publication No 250-1991 When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated indoor only See enclosure options for specific enclosure style quoted

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA ltFEFF004f007000740069006f006e00730020007000650072006d0065007400740061006e007400200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000700072006f00660065007300730069006f006e006e0065006c007300200066006900610062006c0065007300200070006f007500720020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c00690073006100740069006f006e0020006500740020006c00270069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e002e00200049006c002000650073007400200070006f0073007300690062006c0065002000640027006f00750076007200690072002000630065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f0062006100740020006500740020005200650061006400650072002c002000760065007200730069006f006e002000200035002e00300020006f007500200075006c007400e9007200690065007500720065002egt PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 8: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

P-4 Overview

Catalog Number Explanation

The PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Standard Configured Drives catalog numbering scheme is shown below

Position

1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16+

23B ndash D 4P0 D 1 0 4 N N ndash P6a b c d e f g h i j

aDrive

Code Type

23B PowerFlex 40

bVoltage Rating

Code Voltage Ph

D 480V ac 3

cAmp Rating

480V 60Hz Input

Code Amps kW (Hp)

1P4 14 04 (05)

2P3 23 075 (10)

4P0 40 15 (20)

6P0 60 22 (30)

010 105 40 (50)

012 12 55 (75)

017 17 75 (10)

024 24 11 (15)

dEnclosure

Code Enclosure

C NEMAUL Type 4X Dagger

D NEMAUL Type 4 Dagger

Dagger The design of the PowerFlex 40 StandardConfigured Drive supports indoor and outdoorapplications that are not in direct sunlight

fEmission Class

Code Rating

0 Not Filtered

gVersion

Code Version

4 RS485 (Standard)

C ControlNet

D DeviceNet

E EtherNetIP

P PROFIBUS DP

hCode Rating

N Reserved

iCode Rating

N Reserved

eHIM

Code Interface Module

1 Fixed Keypad on Drive

F

Fixed Keypad on Drive and LCDDisplay with Digital Speed Control

HIM on Enclosure Door(22-HIM-C2S)

This option changes the enclosure rating toindoor only

jOptions

Code Description

-E22DeviceNet Quick Disconnect

(Bottom)

-E23DeviceNet Quick Disconnect (Left

Side)

-P3 Motor Circuit Protector

-P3TMotor Circuit Protector (Customer

wiring into top of device)

-P6 Disconnect Switch - Fused

-P6TDisconnect Switch - Fused

(Customer wiring into top of device)

-R3DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpringReturn HOA and Power Disconnect

Aux Contact

-R4 DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs)

-R5-R3 plus 4 IO Quick Disconnects

and (1) 24V DC Receptacle

-S1HandOffAuto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S4 AutoManual SS (Speed Ref)

-S7 Start and Stop PB

-S8 ForwardReverse SS

-S18Door Mounted Local Speed Pot (1-

Turn)

-S20LocalRemote and Local Control

OffRun Forward Selector Switches

-S21LocalOffRemote with 1 NO

Interposing Relay

-S22Spring Return HandOff Auto SS

(StartStopSpeed Ref)

-S23 Clear Fault PB

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 1

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the standard features and operation for PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives and associated options

Standard Features This package integrates the Standard PowerFlex 40 drive The PowerFlex 40 drive can be used for Volts per hertz or Sensorless Vector applications and offers an Autotune feature allowing the drive to adapt to individual motor characteristics

The PowerFlex 40 is assembled in an enclosure which includes the following featureshellip

bull NEMAUL Type 44X - indoor and outdoor applications other than direct sunlight (1)

bull Flange mount driveexternal heatsink reducing overall enclosure size

bull Mounting feet - orientation is adjustable per customer requirements

If required the drive can be removed from the front of the enclosure for ease of assembly or repair

Low cost highly configurable IO inputs andor 0-10V4-20 mA outputs that are not used by program standard features and options are available for customer use

For information on hellip See page hellipStandard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-15IO Options 1-16

(1) The enclosure does not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation corrosion or contamination which may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected For further information on criteria associated with NEMA enclosure ratings refer to NEMA standards Publication No 250-1991 When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated indoor only See enclosure options for specific enclosure style quoted

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 9: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

Chapter 1

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the standard features and operation for PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives and associated options

Standard Features This package integrates the Standard PowerFlex 40 drive The PowerFlex 40 drive can be used for Volts per hertz or Sensorless Vector applications and offers an Autotune feature allowing the drive to adapt to individual motor characteristics

The PowerFlex 40 is assembled in an enclosure which includes the following featureshellip

bull NEMAUL Type 44X - indoor and outdoor applications other than direct sunlight (1)

bull Flange mount driveexternal heatsink reducing overall enclosure size

bull Mounting feet - orientation is adjustable per customer requirements

If required the drive can be removed from the front of the enclosure for ease of assembly or repair

Low cost highly configurable IO inputs andor 0-10V4-20 mA outputs that are not used by program standard features and options are available for customer use

For information on hellip See page hellipStandard Features 1-1Enclosure Options 1-2Communication Options 1-3Power Disconnect Options 1-4Operator Device Options 1-9Quick Disconnects 1-15IO Options 1-16

(1) The enclosure does not normally protect electrical equipment from condensation corrosion or contamination which may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings Users must make adequate provisions to safeguard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected For further information on criteria associated with NEMA enclosure ratings refer to NEMA standards Publication No 250-1991 When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated indoor only See enclosure options for specific enclosure style quoted

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 10: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

1-2 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Enclosure Options NEMAUL Type 4 (Position 9 Code D)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4 painted mild steel which supports both NEMAUL Type 4 and NEMAUL Type 12 applications Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

NEMAUL Type 4X (Position 9 Code C)

The enclosure provided is a NEMAUL Type 4X The material is type 304 stainless steel Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure They are designed to meet hose-down dust and external icing and rust resistance design tests Doors and openings will be gasket sealed There are no ventilation openings within the enclosure to allow for free exchange of inside and outside air

Note If optional Door Mounted HIM is not supplied the design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 11: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-3

Communication Options DeviceNet (Position 12 Code D)

The DeviceNet option is drive mounted and consists of the DeviceNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-D) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When DeviceNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the DeviceNet option refer to the PowerFlex DeviceNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM003hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

EtherNetIP (Position 12 Code E)

The EtherNetIP option is drive mounted and consists of the EtherNetIP communication adaptor (22-COMM-E) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When EtherNetIP is present no other communications option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to the EtherNetIP option refer to the PowerFlex EtherNetIP Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM004hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

PROFIBUS (Position 12 Code P)

The PROFIBUS option is drive mounted and consists of the PROFIBUS communication adaptor (22-COMM-P) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When PROFIBUS is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to PROFIBUS option refer to the PowerFlex PROFIBUS Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM005hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

ControlNet (Position 12 Code C)

The ControlNet option is drive mounted and consists of the ControlNet communication adaptor (22-COMM-C) and adaptor cover (22B-CCB for frame B drives or 22B-CCC for frame C drives) When ControlNet is present no other communication option is available other than the HIM When used as a slave the HIM will have limited functionality For details related to ControlNet option refer to the PowerFlex ControlNet Adapter User Manual publication 22COMM-UM006hellip

To review this schematic see Figure 21 on page 2-2 and Figure 23 on page 2-4

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 12: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

1-4 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Power Disconnect Options Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Motor Circuit Protector (Position 16+ Code -P3T)

The Drive Motor Circuit Protector option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 140M switch is designed to meet short circuit requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 65 kA short circuit withstand rating Over load protection is supplied by the drive not the motor circuit protector Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 140M 480V 65 kA short circuit withstand rating3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA ltFEFF004f007000740069006f006e00730020007000650072006d0065007400740061006e007400200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000700072006f00660065007300730069006f006e006e0065006c007300200066006900610062006c0065007300200070006f007500720020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c00690073006100740069006f006e0020006500740020006c00270069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e002e00200049006c002000650073007400200070006f0073007300690062006c0065002000640027006f00750076007200690072002000630065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f0062006100740020006500740020005200650061006400650072002c002000760065007200730069006f006e002000200035002e00300020006f007500200075006c007400e9007200690065007500720065002egt PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 13: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-5

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the bottom of the device

Component Specifications

Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (Position 16+ Code -P6T)

The Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch option is factory installed and provides a manual means of disconnecting input power to the drive The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 194R switch is designed to meet disconnect switch requirements for branch circuit protection The rotary style handle is padlockable in On or Off position This option has a 100 kA short circuit withstand rating Class J fuses are supplied with the disconnect switch Incoming customer supplied power cables terminate at terminals R S T (L1 L2 L3) located on the top of the device

Component Specifications

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Switch A-B Bulletin 194R 600V 100 kA short circuit withstand ratingIntegral class J fuses Captive terminal clamps3-pole Rod operatedUL listed CE Approved CSA ASTA and LOVAG Certified

Handle Rotary style handle through the door Door interlockedPadlockable in On or Off position Defeatable in the On positionTrue switch status indicationIP66 (Type 3R 3 12 4 4X)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-6 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Main Fuses (F1-F3)

Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines If input fuses are not provided with your drive recommended fuse values are shown in Table 1A The input fuse ratings listed in Table 1A are applicable for one drive per branch circuit No other load may be applied to that fused circuit

The recommended fuse type for all PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives is UL Class J

Table 1A Branch Fusing

ATTENTION Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection be provided to protect input power wiring Install the fuses recommended in Table 1A Do not exceed the fuse ratings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Voltage Rating Drive Rating HP Fuse Rating Amps

480V AC 05 3

10 6

20 10

30 15

50 20

75 25

10 30

15 50

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-7

Input Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about input power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC input power to the drive package

1 Select the proper wire size according to NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Note that you must punch openings in the Option Cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1B

2 Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire VAC) to the appropriate terminals Connect the AC input power leads to terminalsL1 L2 L3 on the fused disconnect switch or motor circuit protector

Note Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3) options are bottom fed Drive Input Fused Disconnect Switch (-P6T) and Drive Motor Circuit Protector (-P3T) options are top fed

3 Tighten the AC input terminal power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1B

Table 1B Component Current Ratings and Wire Sizing

ATTENTION Protect the contents of the options cabinet from metal chips and other debris while drilling the conduit openings Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

PowerFlex 40 SPD Drive Rating - 480V

HP Continuous Current Rating Amps

Factory Power Wire Size(1)(2)

(1) Wire is Black Hypalon(2) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Customer Terminal Wire Size

Operating Torque

05-3 30 25 mm2

(14 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

5-75 30 35 mm2

(12 AWG)25-84 mm2

(14-8 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

10-15 60 40 mm2

(10 AWG)25-160 mm2

(14-4 AWG)40 N-m(35 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-8 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Output Power Wiring

Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about output power wiring recommendations and selection

To connect AC output power wiring from the drive to the motor

1 Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards Power terminal block specifications are listed in Table 1C

Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods If more than three drivemotor connections per conduit are required shielded cable must be used If possible each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads

2 Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminalsU V W (T1 T2 T3) on the power terminal block located on the drive

3 Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 1C

Table 1C AC Output Power Terminal Block Specifications

ATTENTION Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages Also if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor leads Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily injury

ATTENTION Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in the same conduit This can cause interference with drive operation Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment

Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Recommended Torque

B 53 mm2 (10 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 17-22 N-m (16-19 lb-in)

C 84 mm2 (8 AWG) 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 29-37 N-m (26-33 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-9

Operator Device Options HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S1)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of theactual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

HandOffAuto Selector Switch (Code S1)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S4 S7 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Maintained4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 24 on page 2-5

Figure 25 on page 2-6

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-10 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S4)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides an AutoManual selector switch

The AutoManual selector switch determines the source of the actual drive speed reference Using 2-wire control in Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1] In Manual mode the speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Manual mode set parameter P052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo Refer to the table below and the PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 for other options

AutoManual Selector Switch (Code S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 or S22

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Manual Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

AutoManualSelector Switch

2 position Maintained1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 26 on page 2-7

Figure 27 on page 2-8Figure 28 on page 2-9

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-11

Start and Stop Push Buttons (Position 16+ Code S7)

This option provides factory installed 800F Start and Stop push buttons

In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start Using 3-wire control speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0] The Stop push button may also be used as a fault reset

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S20 S21 S22 or S23

ForwardReverse Selector Switch (Position 16+ Code S8)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a ForwardReverse selector switch

When configured for 2-wire control the drive will start when the selector switch is set to Forward When the selector switch is set to Reverse the drive will run in reverse If the selector switch is operated while the drive is running a change of direction command will occur If the drive is stopped and the selector switch is operated a change of direction command will occur The speed source is parameter P070 [Preset Freq 0]

When configured for 3-wire control (Code S7 with S8) the selector switch only changes direction The drive is started and stopped via the Start and Stop push buttons (Code S7)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S20 or S21

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Start Push Button Flush head Green 1 NO contactStop Push Button Extended head Red 1 NC contactLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics Figure 27 on page 2-8

Figure 29 on page 2-10Figure 210 on page 2-11

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

ForwardReverseSelector Switch

2-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NO amp 1 NC contacts3-Wire 2 position Maintained 1 NC contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematics 2-Wire Control Figure 25 on page 2-6 Figure 28 on page 2-9

Figure 211 on page 2-123-Wire Control Figure 210 on page 2-11

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-12 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Local Speed Potentiometer (Code S18)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted one turn potentiometer for speed control The device provides the speed source when no digital inputs are active

When this option is provided it becomes the speed source for the Hand mode of the HandOffAuto selector switch (Option S1) and the Manual mode of the AutoManual selector switch (Option S4)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3-R5

Local Control OffRun Forward and LocalRemote Selector Switches (Code S20)

This option provides two factory installed 800F door mounted selector switches The LocalRemote selector switch determines the source of the start stop speed and direction commands In Local mode the factory default setting for parameter P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

In Remote mode the factory default setting for parameter A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo The OffRun Forward selector switch allows the drive to be started and stopped when in Local Control

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S21 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA CertifiedScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Speed Potentiometer 1-turn 10k 225W 500VLegend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 213 on page 2-14

Bulletin 800F Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Local Control OffRun Forward Selector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

LocalRemoteSelector Switch

2 position Maintained 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 212 on page 2-13

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-13

LocalOffRemote Selector Switch With One Normally Open Interposing Relay (Code S21)

This 800F door mounted operator device and interposing relay option is factory installed and provides a LocalOffRemote selector switch

The LocalOffRemote selector switch will start the drive in Local mode and stop it in Off mode In Remote mode the drive will be stopped and started from the factory installed CR1 contact which is energized by a customer supplied and protected 120V AC source In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

In both Local and Remote modes the speed source is parameter A070 [Preset Freq 0]

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 or S22

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

LocalOffRemoteSelector Switch

3 position Maintained 2 NO contacts

Interposing Control Relay

1 relay 10 amp 120V AC coil Octal base

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 214 on page 2-15

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-14 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

Spring Return Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (Code S22)

This 800F door mounted operator device is factory installed and provides a HandOffAuto selector switch The Hand position is equipped with a spring return

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in Hand mode and stop the drive in Off mode The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand In Auto mode the drive will be stopped and started from remote contact closures In all cases the Stop input to the drive must be present before the drive will start

The HandOffAuto selector switch also determines the source of the actual drive speed reference In Hand mode speed source is parameter A072 [Preset Freq 2] In Auto mode speed source is parameter A071 [Preset Freq 1]

If the door mounted speed potentiometer (Option S18) is supplied and it is intended to be the speed reference in Hand mode set parameter A052 [Digital In2 Sel] to option 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Spring Return HOA Selector Switch (Code S22)

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Codes R3 R5 S1 S4 S7 S20 or S21

Speed Reference Parameter Settings

Hand Mode Auto Mode P038 [Speed Reference] A051 [Digital In1 Sel] A052 [Digital In2 Sel]

Preset Speed Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo

Speed Pot (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

Communication Port(1) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo

HIM (Door) Preset Speed 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (0-10V) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 13 ldquo10V In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo

Analog Input (4-20mA) 4 ldquoPreset Freqrdquo 14 ldquo20mA In Ctrlrdquo 6 ldquoComm Portrdquo(1) Communication port will have both logic and reference control

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAuto Selector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained) 4 NO contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 216 on page 2-17

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-15

Clear Fault Push Button (Code S23)

This option provides a factory installed 800F Clear Fault push button

Component Specifications

This option is not compatible with Code S7

Quick Disconnects DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Bottom (Code E22)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the bottom of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E23

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

DeviceNet Quick Disconnect - Left Side (Code E23)

A Brad Harrison 5 pin bulkhead male receptacle is provided and wired to the drive mounted DeviceNet module The connector is located through the left side of the enclosure providing a quick disconnect This option is designed to enhance the DeviceNet offering (Position 12 Code D) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) or E22

To review schematic refer to Figure 24 on page 2-5

To review layout refer to Figure 34 on page 3-4

For NEMAUL Type 4 or less stringent environments the outer connector construction is made of plastic designed to withstand washdown conditions

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

Clear Fault Push Button

Flush head Black 1 NO contact

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) BlueSchematic Figure 217 on page 2-18

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-16 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

IO Options DeviceNet IO (4 In2 Out) wSpring Return HOA and Power Disconnect Aux Contact (Position 16+ Code R3)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R and a power disconnect auxiliary contact mounted internal to the cabinet

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters

This option is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off Two inputs and two outputs are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R4 R5 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNY42R will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Schematic Figure 218 on page 2-19

Publication 23B-IN001G

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options 1-17

DeviceNet Point IO wIB4 (4 Inputs) (Position 16+ Code R4)

This option provides a factory installed 1734-ADNX Point IO Scanner in combination with a 1734-IB4 (4 input) four point 24V DC sink input

The drive DeviceNet is prewired to the subnet connector of the 1734-ADNX The customer is required to make the DeviceNet connection directly to the 1734-ADNX network connector The 1734-IB4 is connected via a backplane offering four available inputs for customer use

The Point IO Scanner allows data to be gathered from the drive mounted DeviceNet and the 1734-IB4 (4 input) appear as one node on the communication system

Refer to publication 1734-IN051 for more detail on the 1734-IB4

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options 4 C E P (Position 12) R3 or R5

Note Customer is required to supply external 24V DCAC to power 1734-ADNX scanner

1734-ADNX Devices IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

1734-IB4 Devices Refer to publication 1734-IN051Schematic Figure 219 on page 2-20

Publication 23B-IN001G

1-18 PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options

DeviceNet IO (4 In 2 Out) wSpring Return HOA Power Disconnect Aux Contact and 4 IO Quick Disconnects (Position 16+ Code R5)

This option provides a factory installed 800F door mounted operator device a 100-DNY42R mounted internal to the cabinet a power disconnect auxiliary contact four IO quick disconnects and a 24V DC male receptacle

The HandOffAuto selector switch will start the drive while held in the Hand mode and stop it in the Off mode The default speed reference comes from parameter P038 option 4 (Preset Freq) The selector switch has a spring return disallowing the operator to remain in Hand When in Auto the default speed reference is derived parameter A051 option 4 (Preset Freq)

The 100-DNY42R is powered by DeviceNet and provides control based on customer control parameters The inputs and outputs are powered by customer supplied 24V DC

This options is prewired with an auto contact from the HandOffAuto selector switch between the IO V+ and IN0 terminals The main power disconnect auxiliary contact is wired between the IO V+ and IN1 terminals indicating if the disconnect is on or off The four IO quick disconnects allow the customer to quickly connect to the remaining two inputs and outputs that are available for customer use

Component Specifications

This option must be used with the drive mounted DeviceNet option D (Position 12) and is not compatible with options R3 R4 S1 S4 S7 S8 S20 S21 or S22 The drive mounted DeviceNet and the 100-DNYR42 will appear as separate nodes on the communication system

Bulletin 800F Devices

IEC style Internationally ratedMeet IP65IP66 and NEMAUL Type 44X13UL Listed CSA Certified10 amp contactsScrew terminals 03ndash35 mm2 (22ndash12 AWG) maximum

HandOffAutoSelector Switch

3 position Hand (spring return) Off Auto (maintained)3 NO amp 3 NC contacts

Legend Plate 30 x 50 mm Black with white letteringWiring 08 mm2 (18 AWG) Blue100-DNY42R cULus Listed CSA CE

DeviceLogixtrade Rotary address switches24V DC or 120V AC inputsHigh-Capacity transistor or Relay outputsODVA Compliance v20 TestedPower Disconnect Auxiliary Contact1 NO amp 1 NC Side mounted contacts

Receptacle Shell Black anodized machined aluminumConnector Insert NylonContacts Machined brass with gold over nickel platingSchematic Figure 220 on page 2-21

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 2

Control Wiring Overview

Chapter Objectives This chapter describes the control and signal wiring connection options

Control Wiring Overview Refer to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for additional detailed information about control and signal wiring

The Control IO Terminal Block (TB1) and Relay Terminal Block (TB2) located on the drive Main Control Board provide terminals for interfacing customer supplied control inputs and outputs All analog and discrete control wiring will be made at these terminals

To connect control and signal wiring to the drive package

1 Wire the control and signal leads by routing them according to the drive option type Note that you must punch openings in the option cabinet of the desired conduit size following NEC and all applicable local codes and standards IO terminal block specifications are listed in Table 2A

Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 03 meters (1 foot)

2 Connect the control and signal wiring to the IO terminals located on the drive

3 Tighten the IO terminals to the proper torque according to drive type as shown in Table 2A

Table 2A IO Terminal Block Specifications

For information on hellip See page hellipControl Wiring Overview 2-1Schematic Drawings 2-2

Voltage Rating Maximum Wire Size(1)

(1) Maximumminimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations

Minimum Wire Size Torque

208-460V AC 13 mm2 (16 AWG) 013 mm2 (26 AWG) 05-08 N-m (44-7 lb-in)

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-2 Control Wiring Overview

Schematic Drawings Figure 21 Power Distribution Option

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-3

Figure 22 Drive Ratings

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-4 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 23 Control Logic Options 4 C D E amp P

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-5

Figure 24 Control Logic Option S1

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-6 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 25 Control Logic Option S1 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-7

Figure 26 Control Logic Option S4

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-8 Control Wiring Overview

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 27 Control Logic Option S4 amp S7

Control Wiring Overview 2-9

Figure 28 Control Logic Option S4 with S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-10 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 29 Control Logic Option S7

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-11

Figure 210 Control Logic Option S7 and S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-12 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 211 Control Logic Option S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-13

Figure 212 Control Logic Option S20

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-14 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 213 Control Logic Option S18

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-15

Figure 214 Control Logic Option S21

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-16 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 215 Control Logic Option S22

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-17

Figure 216 Control Logic Option S22 amp S8

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-18 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 217 Control Logic Option S23

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-19

Figure 218 Control Logic Option R3 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-20 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 219 Control Logic Option R4

Publication 23B-IN001G

Control Wiring Overview 2-21

Figure 220 Control Logic Option R5 with P3P3T or P6P6T

Publication 23B-IN001G

2-22 Control Wiring Overview

Figure 221 Interconnect Wire amp Parts List

Publication 23B-IN001G

Chapter 3

Mechanical Installation

Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information on mounting a PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive

Mounting Considerations Environment

Before deciding on an installation site verify that the PowerFlex Drive Packages are not installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust The drives are to be installed per the environmental rating they have been designed for

Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature

PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drives are designed to operate at -10deg to 40degC (14deg to 104degF) surrounding air temperature The design of the PowerFlex Standard Configured Drive supports indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive For best air movement do not mount drives directly above each other Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the drive This area must be kept clear of all control and power wiring

For information on hellip See page hellipMounting Considerations 3-1Dimensions 3-2Layout Drawings 3-4

ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper installation The Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-2 Mechanical Installation

Figure 31 Minimum Mounting ClearancesDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

Dimensions Figure 32 Frame B DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

1524(600)

Drive orother device

ON

FF

O

3556(1400)

94(037)

3932(1548)

4059(1598)

3366(1325)

2875(1132)

1778(700)

693(273)

3551(1398)

3424(1348)

3048(1200)

2858(1125)

Optional mounting bracket orientation

635(025)

Publication 23B-IN001G

Mechanical Installation 3-3

Figure 33 Frame C DimensionsDimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

ON

FF

O

191 (075)

191(075)

127 (050)

1778(700)

Detail

1461(575)

4608(1814)

4064(1600)

4272(1682)

160(063)

4252(1674)

4572(1800)

Frame C

97(038)

P3 Option3833

(1509)P6 Option

3642(1434)

Publication 23B-IN001G

3-4 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Layout Drawings Figure 34 PowerFlex 40 Frame B Layout Drawing

Mechanical Installation 3-5

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 35 PowerFlex 40 Frame C Layout Drawing

3-6 Mechanical Installation

Publication 23B-IN001G

Figure 36 PowerFlex 40 General Option Layout Drawing

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable AA Standard Configured Drive Products

Table AB Standard PowerFlex 40 Drives

InputOutput Ratings Output Frequency 0-400 Hz (Programmable)Efficiency 975 (Typical)

Approvals

Fuses and Power Disconnecting Means

140M Motor Circuit Protector Provides branch circuit protection 65 kA short circuit withstand194R Fused Disconnect Provides branch circuit protection 100 kA short circuit withstand Class J fuses

Protective Features Over Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)Under Voltage 480V AC Input ndash Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)

Environment Ambient Operating Temperature NEMA 412 4X (IP66) ndash10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F) (1)

Cooling Method Fan (All drive ratings)

(1) The design of the PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive NEMA 412 and 4X packages support indoor and outdoor applications that are not in direct sunlight When optional Door Mounted HIM is supplied enclosure is rated for indoor use only

Control Carrier Frequency 2-4 kHz Drive rating and heat calculations are based on 4 kHz

Digital Control Inputs(Input Current = 6 mA)

SRC (Source) Mode 18 ndash 24 Volts = ON 0 ndash 6 Volts = OFFSNK (Sink) Mode 0 ndash 6 Volts = ON 18 ndash 24 Volts = OFF

Analog Control Inputs 4-20mA Analog 250 ohm input impedance0-10V DC Analog 100k ohm input impedanceExternal Pot 1-10k ohms 2 Watt minimum

Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay)Resistive Rating 30A at 30V DC 30A at 125V AC 30A at 240V ACInductive Rating 05A at 30V DC 05A at 125V AC 05A at 240V AC

Opto Outputs30V DC 50 mANon-inductive

Analog Output (10-bit)0-10V 1k ohm Min

Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type UL Class J CC T or Type BS88 600V (550V) or equivalentRecommended Circuit Breakers HMCP circuit breaker or equivalent

Protective Features Motor Protection I2t overload protection ndash 150 for 60 Secs 200 for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)Overcurrent 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous faultControl Ride Through Minimum ride through is 05 Secs - typical value 2 SecsFaultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings

Environment Altitude 1000 m (3300 ft) max without deratingStorage Temperature ndash40 to 85 degrees C (ndash40 to 185 degrees F)Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains

volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non-condensingShock (operating) 15G peak for 11ms duration (plusmn10ms)Vibration (operating) 1G peak 5 to 2000 Hz

Control Frequency AccuracyDigital Input Within plusmn005 of set output frequencyAnalog Input Within 05 of maximum output frequencyAnalog Output plusmn2 of full scale 10-bit resolution

Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation plusmn2 of base speed across a 401 speed range1 of base speed across a 601 speed range

Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp Coast DC-Brake Ramp-to-Hold and S CurveAccelDecel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 -

600 seconds in 01 second incrementsIntermittent Overload 150 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200 Overload capability for up to 3 secondsElectronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

UL508C ULreg

LISTED 966X

IN D C O NT EQ

C CSA C 222 No 14

Publication 23B-IN001G

A-2 Specifications

Notes

Publication 23B-IN001G

Appendix BReplacement PartsTable BA ComponentsDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerMotor Circuit ProtectorOption P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05 140M-C2E-B40(2)

(2) Part of Motor Circuit Protector Replacement Kit

Allen-Bradley10 140M-C2E-B63(2) Allen-Bradley20 140M-D8E-C10(2) Allen-Bradley30 140M-D8E-C16(2) Allen-Bradley50 140M-D8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley75 140M-F8E-C25(2) Allen-Bradley10 140M-F8E-C32(2) Allen-Bradley15 140M-F8E-C45(2) Allen-Bradley

Replacement Kit (1)

Option P3

(1) Replacement Kit includes Motor Circuit Protector and top and bottom terminal labelsinstructions Does not include handle adaptor or connection rod

MCP1 480V AC 05 363326 Allen-Bradley10 363333 Allen-Bradley20 363337 Allen-Bradley30 363341 Allen-Bradley50 363345 Allen-Bradley75 363349 Allen-Bradley10 363353 Allen-Bradley15 363357 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

190-HS4140M-C-DN66

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Handle Adaptor Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-15 140M-D-HA Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P3 or P3T

MCP1 480V AC 05-575-15

194R-NX12140M-C-DS

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Operator Terminal Markings

MCP1 480V AC 05-50 A46006-086-01(2)

140M-C-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

75-15 A46006-091-01(2)

140M-F-TE(2)Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Disconnect Switch Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-10 194R-NJ030P3 Allen-Bradley15 194R-NJ060P3 Allen-Bradley

Operator Handle Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-HS4 Allen-Bradley

Operator Shaft Option P6 or P6T

DS1 480V AC 05-15 194R-R1 Allen-Bradley

Main FusesOption P6 or P6T

F1 F2 F3 480V AC 05 LPJ-3SP BussmanAJT-3 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-6SP Bussman20 LPJ-10 Bussman

LPJ-10SP BussmanAJT-10 Ferraz-Shawmut

30 LPJ-15 BussmanLPJ-15SP Bussman

50 LPJ-20 BussmanLPJ-20SP BussmanAJT-20 Ferraz-Shawmut

75 LPJ-25 BussmanLPJ-25SP BussmanAJT-25 Ferraz-Shawmut

10 LPJ-30 BussmanLPJ-30SP BussmanAJT-30 Ferraz-Shawmut

15 LPJ-50 BussmanLPJ-50SP Bussman

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-2 Replacement Parts

Publication 23B-IN001G

Table BA Components (Continued)

Table BB Communication Options

Table BC Quick Disconnect Options

Table BD HIM Options

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDrive Module(with Heatsink)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3F104 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0F104 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0F104 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010F104 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012F104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017F104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024F104 Allen-Bradley

Drive Module(Plate Drive)

EA1 480V AC 05 22B-D1P4H204 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D2P3H204 Allen-Bradley20 22B-D4P0H204 Allen-Bradley30 22B-D6P0H204 Allen-Bradley50 22B-D010H204 Allen-Bradley75 22B-D012H104 Allen-Bradley10 22B-D017H104 Allen-Bradley15 22B-D024H104 Allen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerControlNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-C Allen-BradleyDeviceNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-D Allen-BradleyEtherNet EA1 All All 22-COMM-E Allen-BradleyPROFIBUS EA1 All All 22-COMM-P Allen-BradleyAdaptor

Frame BFrame C

EA1EA1

AllAll

05-5075-15

22B-CCB22B-CCC

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDeviceNet - Bottom E22 All All 41358N Brad HarrisonDeviceNet - L Side E23 All All 41358N Brad Harrison

Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerDoor MountedIP 66 (NEMAUL Type

All All 22-HIM-C2S Allen-Bradley

Replacement Parts B-3

Table BE Operator DevicesControl Options

(1) P6 and P6T option only(2) P3 and P3T option only(3) R5 option only(4) Option S8 when S7 is not ordered(5) Legend plates are not stocked for general sale A custom quote is required to purchase

Option Description Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerOption S1 Selector Switch

Mounting LatchContact Block - 4 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S4 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS1SS1SS1SS1SS1

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354650

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S7 Push Button (Green)Push Button (Red)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend PlateLegend Plate

PB2PB3PB2 PB3PB2PB3PB2PB3

All All 800FP-F3800FP-E4800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01354666354859

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S8 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOContact Block - 1 NCLegend Plate

SS3SS3SS3SS3SS3

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10800F-X01(4)

354662

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S18 PotentiometerOperatorLegend Plate

RH1RH1

All All 800F-POT6362657

Allen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S20 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend PlateLegend Plate

SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1 SS2SS1SS2

All All 800FP-SM22800F-ALP800F-X10354702354786

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-Bradley(5)

Option S21 Selector SwitchAnti-Rotation SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 2 NOLegend PlateMOVRelayRelay Socket (Base)Relay Retainer Clip

SS2SS2SS2SS2SS2CR1CR1CR1CR1

All All 800FP-SM32800F-ALC1800F-ALP800F-X10354769V130LA10A700-HA 32A1700-HN125700HN159

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

HarrisAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Option S22 Selector SwitchMounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

SS2SS2SS2SS2

All All 800FP-SL32800F-ALP800F-X10354614

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option S23 Push Button (Black)Mounting LatchContact Block - 1 NOLegend Plate

PB1PB1PB1PB1

All All 800FP-F2800F-ALP800F-X10382966

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Option R3R5 Selector SwitchAux Contact Adapter(1)

Aux Contact(1)

Aux Contact(2)

Contact Block - 5 NOLegend PlateIO ModuleQuick Disconnect(3)

Quick Disconnect(3)

Terminal Block(3)

Fuse Block(3)

Fuse(3)

SS2DS1DS1MCP1SS2SS2EA4RCPT1-RCPT4RCPT5TB4F6F6

All All 800FP-SL32CR194R-AA195-GA11140M-C-ASA11800F-X10354614100-DNY42R888D-F4AC2-1888D-M4AE1-11492-WTF31492-H6MDA-3

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley(5)

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-BradleyBussmann

Option R4 DeviceNet AdaptorPoint IO Terminal BaseInput IO Module

EA4EA4IB4

All All 1734-ADNX1734-TB3SQ101734-IB4

Allen-BradleyAllen-BradleyAllen-Bradley

Publication 23B-IN001G

B-4 Replacement Parts

Table BF MiscellaneousDescription Designation Voltage HP Part Number ManufacturerFan FAN All 05-50 2410ML-05W-B30-B00 NMB Tech

Publication 23B-IN001G

wwwrockwellautomationcom

Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel (1) 4143822000 Fax (1) 4143824444

EuropeMiddle EastAfrica Rockwell Automation VorstlaanBoulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel (32) 2 663 0600 Fax (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel (852) 2887 4788 Fax (852) 2508 1846

Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Publication 23B-IN001G-EN-P ndash May 2008 350679-P07Supersedes 23B-IN001F-EN-P ndash January 2007 Copyright copy 2007 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Important User Information
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What Is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Manual Conventions
      • General Precautions
      • Compliance Certification
      • Catalog Number Explanation
          • Chapter 1
            • PowerFlex 40 Standard Configured Drive Standard Features and Options
              • Chapter Objectives
              • Standard Features
              • Enclosure Options
              • Communication Options
              • Power Disconnect Options
              • Operator Device Options
              • Quick Disconnects
              • IO Options
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Chapter Objectives
                      • Control Wiring Overview
                      • Schematic Drawings
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Mechanical Installation
                              • Chapter Objectives
                              • Mounting Considerations
                              • Dimensions
                              • Layout Drawings
                                  • Appendix A
                                    • Specifications
                                      • Appendix B
                                        • Replacement Parts
                                          • Publication 23B-IN001G -EN-P - May 2008 350679-P07
                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                              Intro

                                              ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                                              Generic pub print specs

                                              ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                              ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                              IN RN pub type specs

                                              UM RM PM pub type specs

                                              AP PP pub type specs

                                              BR pub type specs

                                              Field definitions

                                              ampL04032006ampRampP
                                              PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                              EA = Each
                                              PK = Pack
                                              PD = Pad
                                              RL = Roll
                                              BK = Book
                                              CT = Carton
                                              BX = Box
                                              ST = Set
                                              Multiple Order Qty
                                              Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                              Business Group
                                              The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                              CorporateBusiness Development
                                              Finance
                                              Human Resources
                                              IT
                                              Logistics
                                              Manufacturing
                                              Marketing Commercial
                                              Marketing Europe
                                              Marketing Other
                                              Operations
                                              Order Services
                                              Other
                                              Process Improvement
                                              Procurement
                                              Quality
                                              Sales
                                              Max Order Quantity
                                              Presale items = 100
                                              Postsale items = 5
                                              NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                              Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                              Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                              Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                              BindingStitching
                                              For a Form (F) use
                                              CARBONLESS
                                              CUTSHEET
                                              ENVELOPE
                                              For a Book (B) use
                                              LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                              PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                              PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                              SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                              STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                              STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                              STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                              THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                              THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                              Sides Printed
                                              Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                              Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                              Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                              Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                              Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                                              Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                              Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                              Paper Stock Type
                                              Description
                                              PLAIN Bond
                                              ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                              BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                              BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                              C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                              C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                              C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                              C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                              CARD Card Stock
                                              CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                              CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                              COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                              CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                              CUSTOM Custom
                                              CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                              ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                              ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                              ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                              GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                              GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                              HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                              INDEX Index
                                              LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                              MICROPRT Micro Print
                                              OFFSET Offset
                                              PART2 2 Part
                                              PART3 3 Part
                                              PART4 4 Part
                                              PART5 5 Part
                                              PART6 6 Part
                                              PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                              PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                              PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                              PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                              RECYL Recycled
                                              SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                              SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                              SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                              TAG Tag
                                              TEXT Text
                                              TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                              TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                              TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                              TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                              VELLUM Vellum
                                              VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                              WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                              WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                              WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                              Paper Stock Color
                                              Black
                                              Blue
                                              Buff
                                              Canary
                                              Cherry
                                              Clear
                                              Cream
                                              Custom
                                              Goldrenrod
                                              Gray
                                              Green
                                              Ivory
                                              Lavender
                                              Manilla
                                              NCRPinkCanary
                                              NCRWhiteBlue
                                              NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanary
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                              NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                              NCRWhiteGreen
                                              NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                              NCRWhitePink
                                              NCRWhiteWhite
                                              Opaque
                                              Orange
                                              Orchid
                                              Peach
                                              Pink
                                              Purple
                                              Salmon
                                              Tan
                                              Violet
                                              White
                                              Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                              11 x 17
                                              18 x 24 Poster
                                              24 x 36 Poster
                                              3 x 5
                                              36 x 24 Poster
                                              4 x 6
                                              475 x 7
                                              475 x 775
                                              55 x 85
                                              6 x 4
                                              7 x 9
                                              7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                              85 x 11
                                              825 x 10875
                                              825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                              8375 x 10875
                                              9 x 12
                                              A4
                                              A5
                                              Other - Custom size listed below
                                              Drilling Locations
                                              1CENTER
                                              1LEFTTOP
                                              1TOPCENTER
                                              2LEFT
                                              2LEFT2TOP
                                              2TOP
                                              2TOP2LEFT
                                              2TOP3LEFT
                                              2TOP5LEFT
                                              2TOP5RIGHT
                                              3BOTTOM
                                              3LEFT
                                              3LEFT2TOP
                                              3LEFT3TOP
                                              3RIGHT
                                              3TOP
                                              3TOP5LEFT
                                              5BOTTOOM
                                              5CENTER
                                              5LEFT
                                              5RIGHT
                                              5RIGHT2TOP
                                              5TOP
                                              Fold Type
                                              For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                                              HALF Half
                                              C C Fold
                                              DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                              OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                              SAMPLE See Sample
                                              SHORT Short Fold
                                              V V Fold
                                              Z Z Fold
                                              Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                              Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                              77 or more pages NA
                                              33 to 76 pages 25
                                              3 to 32 pages 50
                                              1 or 2 pages 100
                                              Comments
                                              CoverText Stock Spine
                                              100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                                              100 Gloss Text
                                              100 Text
                                              10pt C1S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Cover
                                              10pt C2S Text
                                              10pt Text Stock
                                              110 White Index
                                              12pt C1S Cover
                                              20 White Opaque Bond
                                              50 Colored Offset
                                              50 White Offset
                                              50 White Opaque
                                              60 Cover Stock
                                              60 White Offset
                                              80 Gloss Cover
                                              80 Gloss Text
                                              8pt C1S White
                                              90 White Index
                                              CoverText Ink
                                              Black
                                              Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color
                                              4 color over black
                                              4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                              4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                              4 color + aqueous
                                              4 color + varnish
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              23B-IN001G-EN-P PowerFlex 40 Configured Drives Installation EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial CMKMKE Intelligent Motor Control - 19009 05012008 5 Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 62 31 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                              Corp 17501
                                              Bill To 69
                                              dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                              Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                              Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                              See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                              Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                              This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                              Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                              Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                              IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                                              Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                              Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                              For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                                              RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 14: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 15: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 16: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 17: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 18: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 19: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 20: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 21: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 22: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 23: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 24: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 25: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 26: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 27: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 28: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 29: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 30: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 31: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 32: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 33: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 34: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 35: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 36: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 37: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 38: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 39: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 40: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 41: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 42: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 43: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 44: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 45: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 46: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 47: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 48: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 49: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 50: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 51: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 52: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 53: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 54: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 55: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 56: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 57: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 58: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 59: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 60: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 61: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 62: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 63: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 64: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 65: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 66: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 67: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry
Page 68: PowerFlex 40 Configured AC Drives - Quad Industry